Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 . Finally. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add more detailed modelling elements. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. electrical panels. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements. such as duct. 3 . NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and plumbing engineering workflows. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and piping.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Germany. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and plumbing fixtures. electrical. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials.

After completing each exercise. For example. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. So. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. views. NOTE Depending on your installation. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. For example. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. as well as how to open and save them. On the Contents tab. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. your Training folder may be in a different location. When you open a training file. you can choose to save your work. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. annotations. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. such as templates and families. Metric: files for users working with metric units. In this exercise. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. templates. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. and tags. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. however. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. you learn where the training files are located. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. You do not design entire systems. Create schedules. When you install the training files as instructed. Contact your CAD manager for more information. However. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. and sheets to document the project. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. to provide a richer and more finished design. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Create detail views. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. is located and accessed in the training files location. Metric file names have an _m suffix. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. when you add ductwork.

■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. select the folder in which to save the new file. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. you are prompted to save the changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and click Open.rvt) is selected. Accessing Training Files | 5 . and you can open any supported file type. For Files of type. a list of file types displays. and click Save. You may close the file with or without saving changes. enter the new file name. and click the Training Files icon. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. For example. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. if you open settings. the Open dialog displays. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.rvt. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt and make changes. verify that Project Files (*. click ➤ Save As. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 8 If you have made changes. 3 In the right pane. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll down. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. double-click Imperial or Metric. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For File name. 4 Click the training file name.

6 .

In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In this case. As you work in drawing and schedule views. 2D and 3D view. hence. the operation of the software is parametric. drawing sheets. the parameter is one of association or connection. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the floor or roof remains connected. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and plans. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. drawings. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In the Revit MEP model. If the length of the elevation is changed. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. ■ ■ 7 . the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. scope. and schedules required for a building project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You learn the terminology. quantities. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and phases when you need it. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. In this case. schedules. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. every drawing sheet. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the door retains this relationship to the partition. sections. If you move the partition. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the hierarchy of elements.

Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sprinklers. ducts. Datum elements help to define project context. levels. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. dimensions. filled regions. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and 2D detail components. For example. tags. For example. sprinklers. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and reference planes are datum elements. tags. They help to describe or document the design. grids. walls and ceilings are hosts. and electrical panels. sinks. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. sinks. When you change something. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. boilers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ducts. For example. and electrical panels. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. boilers. They display in relevant views of the design. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works.

you can explicitly control them. This information includes components used to design the model. To place levels. In other cases. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. schedules.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. For example. section views. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. top of wall. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. you do nothing to establish these relationships. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Project: In Revit MEP. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . In Revit MEP. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. and so forth). The project file contains all information for the building design. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. from geometry to construction data. and ceilings. By using a single project file. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and drawings of the design. elevation views. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. North . floors. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. first floor. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. such as roofs. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. However. programming is not required. Often. views of the project. or bottom of foundation. families. If you can draw. and types. for example. Most often. you must be in a section or elevation view.

such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. and similar graphical representation. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can also display several project views at one time. A type can also be a style. pipes. Unlike system and standard component families. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. With a few clicks. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Then experiment with them. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. System families include ducts.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Type: Each family can have several types. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. However. and wires. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. each in-place family contains only a single type. hiding. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. such as a A0 title block. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. A type can be a specific size of a family. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. For example. identical use. System families can be transferred between projects. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. showing. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. For example. For example.

The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To return the panel to the ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.

then select what you want to modify. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. project and system parameters.. data and systems. and settings. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and CAD files. tools used for running analysis on the current design. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. select the tool first.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.. architect-specific tools. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. provides requested information. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . displays frequently used tools. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. By default. For example. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. To keep a panel expanded. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. closes the application menu (double-click). provides access to common tools. when adding duct. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element.

(Open) save the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a file to open. (Export) On the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. click. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. (Save As) export the current drawing. such as Export and Publish.. select a template and create a new drawing.

and Walkthrough. (Licensing) close the file. family. family. provides views including Default 3D.. (Publish) print the current drawing. or template file. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. to. annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Print) access product and license information. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .. To enable or disable a tool item.. click. publish the current project.On the application menu. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. Camera. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. but is not enabled by default. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. annotation.

when you switch to another editing mode. When you are using a command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. displaying the same information. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. check the Status Bar. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Modify. In addition. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Starting with the most recent command. Group. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type.To undo or redo a series of operations. However. workshared components. This displays the command history in a list. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. When you are highlighting an element or component. or the Family Editor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Clipboard. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. To hide the Status Bar. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. To show the Status Bar again. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. repeat the command.

On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. To change existing elements to a different type. for example. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Place a Wall. select one or more elements of the same category. click (Modify). use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. When you place an element in a drawing. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements.

The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. Zoom the view In the tutorials. click Training Files. 1 Click ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example.rvt.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. click . use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms in on the selected area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. To modify or add snap increments. 9 To display SteeringWheels. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 6 Click in the drawing area. Modifying the View | 19 . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. In the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the Navigation bar.

12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press ESC. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. and then using the Zoom tool again. and click tin the Options dialog. As you move the mouse. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. ➤ Options. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . moving the wheel to the desired location. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. Click and drag to orbit the design. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. For more information about SteeringWheels. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and select the duct.Design. 2 Enter ZR. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Small blue dots. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. as shown. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. After you are familiar with these tasks. bottoms. called drag controls. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. referred to as shape handles. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. These are the drag controls. Similar controls. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. and open Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . display along the ends.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. on the Standard toolbar. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the first item in the list. In this example. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Move.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.

Some commands. such as Move and Copy. and drag it to the left as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. click to specify the starting position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. After selecting the element to move. for example. 11 With the duct already selected. you want to move the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . as shown. and click again to specify the ending position. The duct is moved to the new position. In this case.

Supply. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Press ESC twice. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Click OK. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 13 To end a command. Select Mechanical .Return. 14 Enter VG.End a command Some commands.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

settings. In that case. click Browse. You can either select a template from the template library. and open Metric ➤ Templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can choose from several templates. link files. Finally.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. such as coordination review and interference checking. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. system families. 6 Click OK. under Template file. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 27 . and geometry from the starting template. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. and loadable families. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and click Open. the default building levels and standard views. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. such as the default project units and settings. use copy/monitor. and modify system settings. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 5 In the New Project dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. click Training files. such as ducts and pipes. 7 In the Project Browser. under Create new. select Project. New projects inherit all the families. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. 2 In the New Project dialog.rte template. you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. create and manage views. and open North.

14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For example. In the Choose Template dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Manchester. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Project template. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. Click OK. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. When you select the material. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 10 Using the same method. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. navigate to Metric Templates. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. you can select it now. for Energy Data. click (Browse). ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. under Energy Analysis. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Click OK twice. Click Cancel. select Level 1. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. review the construction materials listed. create another new project using the Construction template. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. NH. for City. and select the Systems-Default_Metric.8 In the drawing area. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. ■ For Building Construction. select School or University.rte template and click Open. If you want to use a template other than the default. click Browse. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. (Browse). For Location. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. ■ ■ Under Create new.

25 In the left pane. 290.00 mm. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage.000 mm. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 22 In the right pane. and fire protection systems. For Categories. power distribution systems. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.rfa and click Open. select Identity Data. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.00 mm.00 mm. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.00 mm. under Duct Settings. piping.00 mm. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 110. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. plumbing. After standard settings have been established for an organization. and 310. 27 Click OK. for 20. click Sizes. for 90. Holding CTRL. click Round. 33 Click OK.00 mm. 260. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 24 In the right pane. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 110. 140. and demand factors for electrical systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. and 140. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Click OK twice.00 mm. click Wiring. 23 In the left pane. click Rectangular. for 90. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. select Views. 26 In the right pane.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. under Pipe Settings. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.00 mm. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. under Duct Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. wiring.

To enable this coordination. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You need to create the MEP model for the project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Linking Projects In this exercise. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Family and Type. under Template file. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select View Name. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Auto .Origin to Origin. sheets. For Sort by. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. From the Positioning list. For Then by. select Sub-Discipline. Click Open. families. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. 38 Close the file. select Project. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 5 Click OK. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. under Create new. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. click Training. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed.rvt. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. select Associated Level. click Browse. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. and groups that are contained in a project. In addition. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Select Ascending Click OK twice. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.Mech. Linking Projects | 31 . select the linked architectural model.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. under Constraints. 8 If necessary. select Room Bounding. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .

25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 17 On the Options Bar. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 19 On the left side of the view. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER.Floor. click the level line for 03. click Plan View types. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

34 On the Basics tab. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. a warning message displays. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. select Custom.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. for the link file. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. indicating that an element has changed. and the level 4. 27 In the drawing area. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. After copying. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. and click to select the linked model. appears above the copied elements. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. level 3. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. click By Host View. warnings notify you of any violations. highlight the linked model. 29 In the drawing area. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. Linking Projects | 33 . indicating that a relationship is established. click Custom. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements.

Mechanical and click Apply View Template. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Under Visibility. 2 In the New View Template dialog. for the link file. Click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click Custom. deselect Parking. 7 Click OK twice. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Site. 5 On the Basics tab. 36 Click OK. under View Properties. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Select Show categories from all disciplines. select Custom. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Under Visibility. Roads. Click OK. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. for Name. and Topography. Planting. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. click Custom. deselect Levels. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. click Edit.

9 In the Apply View Template dialog. journal cleanup options. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.rte. click the Graphics tab. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 9 In the Options dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. These settings control the graphics. and your username when using worksharing. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 7 Click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. under Template file. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Browse. 8 Click ➤ Options. Modifying System Settings | 35 . select Mechanical and click OK. they are not saved to project files or template files. select Invert background color. under View Templates. 3 Under Colors. Notice that the drawing area is black. click Training Files. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. selection default options. click the Graphics tab. 5 In the New Project dialog. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. notification preferences. and click OK. 2 In the Options dialog.

the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. click the File Locations tab. select yellow. 11 In the Color dialog. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. select One hour. 14 Click OK. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 21 Close the file without saving it. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 2 In the Options dialog. family template files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 12 Click the General tab. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 19 Press ESC to end the command. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. click the value for Selection color.10 Under Colors. However. 18 Select the wall. and family libraries. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. When an error occurs. select None. and click OK. you specify default file locations. 13 Under Notifications. For Tooltip assistance. the elements causing the error display using this color. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. including your default project template.

centralized. select the folder to save your files to by default. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path.3 Under Default template file. note the list of library names. saving. and click Open. and you can create new libraries. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. 4 Click Cancel. or loading a Revit MEP file. You can modify the existing library names and path. Load. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 7 In the Options dialog. click Browse. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. such as in a large. However. This path is set automatically during the installation process. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. When you are opening. 10 In the Places dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 5 Under Default path for user files. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. In the following illustration. under Default path for family template files. Click and click Browse to select a template. click Places. TIP To view a template. ➤ New ➤ Project. Specifying File Locations | 37 . click Browse. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. you can start a new project with that template. Save. 8 Click Cancel.

12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. Save. and select it as the library path. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. or families. click My Library. ➤ Open. 15 Under Library Name. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and click Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load.11 In the Places dialog. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. click the My Library icon. and click OK twice. and change the name to My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. templates. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and click (Browse).

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you work in a large office. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. click Edit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. and decal image files. 9 In the text editor. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 21 On the File Locations tab. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 11 In the Options dialog. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. view the current path. select Ignore words in uppercase. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Places. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 19 Click Cancel. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. such as bump maps. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 5 In the text editor. 20 Click ➤ Options. 22 Select My Library. This path is determined during installation. If you want to relocate this path. 2 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Settings. specify the new location here. click the Spelling tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. custom color files.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. (Remove Value) to delete the library. click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 23 Click 24 Click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab.

22 In the text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Close. 21 Under Personal dictionary.rte. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. you modify snap increments. click the Spelling tab.17 In the Spelling dialog. click Restore Defaults. 4 In the New Project dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Under Settings. 2 In the New Project dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Training Files. under Template file. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click File menu ➤ Save. 6 In the Snaps dialog. and enter 500 . click Edit. work with snapping turned off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file.. 19 In the Options dialog. under Dimension Snaps. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. 23 In the text editor. 18 Click ➤ Options. you modify snap settings. click OK. In this exercise. 24 In the Options dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 25 Close the file without saving it. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU.

8 In the Snaps dialog. This is the increment that you added previously. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom out until it does so. If it does not. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If you do not have a wheel button. For example. While sketching. enter SM.7 Under Object Snaps. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. deselect Chain. click OK. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. such as ZO to zoom out. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. TIP To zoom while sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.

it will snap to the endpoints. Do not set the wall end point. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. and the wall edges. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. with or without saving it. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. 26 Close the file. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 25 Click OK.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 19 Enter SM. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 22 Move the cursor downward. and delete the value 500 . and move the cursor to the right. and specify the wall endpoint.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you will understand the process. If the tutorial training files are not present. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and then you create a plenum level. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. methodology. As you create the mechanical system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. In this exercise. At the end of the tutorial. In this lesson. duct system and a hydronic piping system. By following the recommended workflow. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you first configure the linked architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. However. you can choose to save your work. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you first plan the system. go to http://www. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. This system consists of a cooling tower. water source heat pump (WSHP). 45 .Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial.

click to select it. under Constraints. and after the linked model highlights. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 1 In the Project Browser. select Room Bounding. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. not in the MEP training file. and double-click West . 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you add a level for plenums. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. ceilings. click Training Files. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.MEP.Space Plan is highlighted. Next. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In this section. roof.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. NOTE When working with a linked file. and click OK.

click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and in the Plan View Types dialog. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Click Plan View Types. and click Properties.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 16 Press Esc. enter 2600mm. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Preparing Spaces | 47 . 9 On the Draw panel. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. For Offset. The new level is placed. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.

for Default View Template. Under View Depth. Under Identity Data. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In the next exercise. select Level Above (Level 3). However. right-click Level 2 Plenum. enter an Offset of 300mm. select Design. for Top. enter 0. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. you place spaces in areas of the building model. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.Plenum. and then place spaces in various types of areas. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. 20 In the Project Browser. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. for View Range. select MEP . and for Offset. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. In this exercise. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. ■ Click OK twice. for Level. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. For View Classification. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . you can choose to save your work. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Edit.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Plenum Plan. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for View Scale. and click Apply Default View Template. For Cut plane. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Under Extents. For Sub-Discipline.

You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Placing Spaces | 49 . select Horizontal. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. and ceilings). For Offset. select New. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Upper Limit. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.Space Plan is highlighted. select Level 2 Plenum. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. For (Tag Location). Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. walls. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Space.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.

Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . ensuring coordination between the files. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. enter 219. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 Click to place the space. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. For Name.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Click OK. enter Library. for Number. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

select Level 3. Placing Spaces | 51 . change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. For Upper Limit. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 21 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select Level 3. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Upper Limit. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. and for Offset. and then press Esc. enter 0.

and scroll to the newly placed space. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the space number to 216A. 10 Click in the number column.7 In the Project Browser. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. click in the name column. and select Corridor. In the schedule.

11 Close the schedule view. 15 Press Esc twice. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. as shown.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

you place a space in a chase.16 Using the method learned previously. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. If necessary. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .

On the Options Bar. right-click. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. for Upper Limit. 10 In the plan view. select Level 3. select Interior and Reference. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. and click Element Properties. 12 Click in the section view. click in the chase area to place the space. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.4 Press Esc. select Roof Level. for Upper Limit. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 0. and then click OK. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the plan view. expand Spaces. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. select the space. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 6 Enter VG.

Bounding elements (such as walls. and maximize the view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . enter 1200. for Name. under Loaded Tags. Under Identity Data. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . All spaces in the view are tagged.Space Plan. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.■ For Limit Offset. 17 Type ZF. ceilings. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. floors. For Number. 15 Press Esc. enter Chase. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. enter 225PC. and click OK.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. click View ➤ Zones. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces.20 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercises. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. click Training Files.Zoning is highlighted. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . which removes the space from the Default zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model.rvt. click Reference. After a space is placed in an area. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and verify that All Disciplines is selected. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.

The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Next. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. As you do this. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. To display space reference lines. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Occupiable. you assign spaces to a zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . The new zone is listed in the System Browser.rvt.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. under Spaces. the Edit Zone tab displays. The Zone tool is active. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ) or 5 In the System Browser. and a new zone is created. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Energy Analysis. click Reference. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. indicating that the space is occupiable. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.

To view the zone in the drawing area. Expand HVAC Zones. and click Finish Editing Zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 5 With the drawing area active. 4 In the drawing area. Instruction. select Computer Lab 222. you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction 221. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. In the System Browser. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Click OK. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Using the Edit Zone tab.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and Electrical 220 spaces. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. select HVAC Zones. and modify the zone properties. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility.

To display space reference lines. 5 Click in the Level 1 . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m.Area B. under Spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.TIP After you finish editing the zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files.Zoning is highlighted. In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. for Name. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. click Reference. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You activated zone visibility in the views. and verify the zone in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Finish Editing Zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.rvt. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.West . under Identity Data. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Zoning. expand 2 . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 9 In the System Browser. 11 Close the System Browser.West . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. enter 2 .Zoning view to activate it. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.

6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 8 In the Level 1 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Verify that the distance is 12mm. 15 Press Esc. zoom out. 9 With the Add Space tool active. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Select Attached End. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning floor plan. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. click in the Level 2 .

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane).East. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and select 109 Lounge. double-click Level 1 . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. for Name Value. and zone information. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. space. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser.rvt. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. double-click the zone tag. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. In this exercise. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning view. you verify the building. verify that Wireframe is selected.Zoning to make it the active view. Front. click the corner where the Top. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. enter Lounge . click Training Files. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. on the ViewCube. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and click OK. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .

TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ ■ On the Details tab. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Click (Highlight). click (Isolate). With 109 Lounge selected.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. select 1_South_Area C. you isolate the space.

You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary.33 °C : 12. click . the space information displays for the selected space. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. For Construction Type.11 °C : 32. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Below the list of spaces and zones. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. the zone information displays for the selected zone. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. This indicates the heating set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.22 °C : N/A is specified. ■ ■ ■ Next. This indicates the outdoor air per person. outdoor air per area. click (Shading). Next. verify that 21. This indicates the cooling set point. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. select 109 Lounge. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. select Lounge/Recreation. and click OK. For Electrical Loads. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. and air changes per hour. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that 23. verify that <Building> is selected. click . heating air temperature. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and then click OK.22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that <Building> is selected. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. scroll down in the left pane. and dehumidification set point. and in the People dialog. click . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. cooling air temperature. For People. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. For Cooling Information. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . For Heating Information. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and humidification set point.

select Level 3. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. For Offset. enter 0. click Cancel. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. floors. roofs.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. open MEP . 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and other room-bounding components. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 12 Using the methods learned previously.

In this exercise. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Plenum. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. enter 212P. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Plenum. space. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Click OK. For Name. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Under Energy Analysis. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. you verified building. and select space Plenum 212P. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and zone information. Under Energy Analysis. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

click in the Value field. under Energy Analysis. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NH. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. verify that <Building> is specified.Space Plan. double-click Level 2 . is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. Click OK twice. this option adjusts the times automatically. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. For Export Complexity. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. If.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. For Sliver Space Tolerance. select space Library 219. For Ground Plane. and click OK. and click OK. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. click Training Files. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). enter 03101. and click Element Properties. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Location. right-click. verify that New Construction is selected. for Energy Data. for Building Service. verify that Manchester. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . click Edit. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. verify that 300 is specified. you need to select this option. On the Place tab. 8 In the drawing area. For Postal Code. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. select School or University. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. On the Weather tab. In order to select a space. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. under Volume Computations. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. for City. verify that Level 1 is selected. For Building Construction. For Project Phase.

In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. For Sensible. verify that School or University is selected. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. verify that Occupiable is selected. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. click in the Value column. and enter 15 sq. for Values. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. 12 Click the Details tab. enter 45 W. select Specified. Next. m. select Heated and cooled. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Location. select Actual. For Space Type. both. Click OK twice. click Edit. Select Area per person. for Values.Audio Visual. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. or neither. Under Power. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. is specified. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). and click OK. click Edit. for Values. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Library . and click to learn the cause for the warning. For Building Construction. You have verified the building information. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Building Service. a cooling load. For Latent. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For People. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Actual. NH. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. Click OK. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For Condition Type. select Specified. enter 60 W. Select the space associated with the warning. verify that Manchester. for Values. verify that <Building> is specified. and then click . 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.

The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. 17 In the loads report. click Calculate. and a loads report displays. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. space. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 16 After you review the loads report. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. under Energy Analysis. There should be no warnings displayed. You should correct the space error in the building model. or zone information. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. select 219 Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. weather. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. and can be modified here. click Information). under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 19 In the drawing area. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads.Space Plan. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.11°C. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Review the loads report for project. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. or make any changes to the model.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and under Heating Information. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. space. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and zone information for the building model. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. In this exercise. 21 Click OK. select 219 Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.

4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. For Color Scheme.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select HVAC Zones.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. click to the right of the building to place the legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. 3 In the drawing area. Click OK. in relatively small increments. 5 Zoom in to the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .

select the color scheme legend.Expanded Ranges. The new scheme displays in the view. select Cooling Load . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. under Schemes. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. and click OK. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.rvt. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. In the next exercise. 11 Using the method learned previously. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m.

For Type. Under Available fields. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Spaces. enter . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. In the Fields dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Formula.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. enter Space Airflow Schedule. For Formula. For Phase. for Select available fields from. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . more category options are available. Click OK. select Air Flow. select HVAC. Select Formula.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Select Schedule building components. ■ Click Calculated Value. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Name. and click OK. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. enter Airflow Delta. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. click (Browse). and then click . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. For Discipline.Space Fill is the active view. select New Construction. In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. In the Calculated Value dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click OK.

In the Color dialog. select Level. verify that Show is highlighted. Header. select Not Between. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. select Number. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. click the color swatch. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Then by. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. For Background Color. a view opens that contains the selected space. For Fields. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and then click Conditional Format. right-click to access schedule properties. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. select Airflow Delta. Select Ascending. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . select red. and Blank line. For Value. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select Level. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Under Conditions to Use. and click OK. ■ The schedule displays. Click OK twice. and then select Hidden field.

7 Close the file with or without saving it.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the next lesson. In this exercise. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In later exercises. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.

After completing the air systems lesson. you size ductwork and validate your air system design.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you modify air terminal parameters. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Then. In this lesson. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After system creation. you will create supply air systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. 79 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).

2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and scroll to space 223. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 In the ceiling view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. 17 Move the cursor down. type 3600. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. verify that Constrain is cleared. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The schedule updates with the new flow data. for Flow. and then press Esc to end the command. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 9 On the Placement panel. If the host element is modified or moved. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . the hosted elements are updated as well. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and press Enter. as shown. Also. 13 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. enter 215 L/s. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. select the diffuser. click Place on Face. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 15 On the Options Bar. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.

select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 22 In the drawing area.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.rfa. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. 25 In the drawing area. 29 Place 2 diffusers. clear Leader. select one of the diffusers. and click Open. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. 24 In the Open dialog. click Yes. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. click Place on Face. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. as shown. As you place the return diffusers. and then press Esc.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 On the Options Bar. Next.

for Reference. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 .Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. as shown. select one of the return diffusers. under Other. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click to select the lines. select Strong Reference. and click OK. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Level. 32 In the Project Browser. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. click Yes. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family.

40 In the drawing area. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. as shown.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select the vertical grid line as shown. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. align the other return diffuser. and then press Esc twice. 43 Using the same method. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left.44 While pressing Ctrl. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . 48 Close the file with or without saving it. for Flow. select both return diffusers. clear LeftArrow. and click OK. and press Enter. enter 310 L/s. under Mechanical. As you place the air terminals. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. 47 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. right-click. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

HVAC Plan . verify that Tag on Placement is selected. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. at the lower left corner of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.200 Neck. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the drawing area. click 1 : 100. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. the space crossing lines display.Design to make it the active view. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and double-click Level 1 . 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. expand HVAC . select M_Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . for Scale.rvt. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.

for Offset. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. move the cursor down. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. Also. 15 Press Esc. Click OK. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. type 6000.Airflow. As a result. enter 170 L/s. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. By copying the diffuser. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. enter 2400. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 11 Select the diffuser. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. for Flow. Under Mechanical . and then press Enter. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. 18 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc.16 Using the same method. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. clear Leader. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . under Available Fields. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Flow. 27 In the schedule. Next. and then right-click in the schedule. 26 Using the method learned previously. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Air Terminals. it is a negative value. 29 Using the same method. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. double-click System Type. and Flow. and press Enter. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Sort by. select 21. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. mark.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Mark. click Edit. enter 210 L/s. type. Type. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. under Other. for Embedded Schedule. and click View Properties. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 25 Click OK 3 times. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. For Category. tile the windows. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. under space 115. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. select Mark. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

31 In the drawing area. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. and maximize Level 1 . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.HVAC Plan . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . As you highlight the zone. as shown.Design.

37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.7-18 kW .3 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. and under Energy Analysis. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.High Efficiency . 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.43 W (approximately 1.Horizontal . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing area. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. select M_WSHP . 35 In the Type Selector.

5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. click Training Files. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. including energy analysis. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You then create the logical connection between the system components. 6 Keep the System Browser open. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. In this exercise. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and click View ➤ Systems. After creating the logical connection. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. When you highlight a space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Plan . 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Design is highlighted. However.rvt. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the title. 44 Zoom in to space 115. enter . 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. As you add diffusers to systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223.

15 Click Cancel. and the system connects them. 11 In the drawing area. 12 In the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Connect Into. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. and Flow value. the number of elements is updated. System Name. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 18 Click OK. review the Number of Elements. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. On the Options Bar. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. the air terminals are the children. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Using the method learned previously.

94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 Click Finish Editing System.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. for Mark. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. which updates the name in the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click OK. 25 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise. under Mechanical.Rename the system Next. click Training Files. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. for System Name.

the Network type provides several solutions. 5 On the Options Bar. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). the space crossing lines display. A Generate Layout tab displays. Also. For Flex Duct Type. and display solution 1. For Duct Type. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 7 On the Options Bar. which provides various layout tools. enter 3000. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . for Solution Type. In this case. For Offset. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it.Design is highlighted. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. select Network. enter 3000. 4 In the drawing area. Select Branch. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Round.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. select the upper left diffuser. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. click Settings. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. For Duct Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan. For Offset. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed.

Either relocate the system components. you’ll get an error in a later step. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. For example. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. Click OK. or offset elevations are incorrect. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Modify. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. enter 900. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. 11 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. as shown. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. and use the drag control to drag it to the left.

The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. thus it is not part of the system. and click to select it. select Duct Color Fill . 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend.Flow. and click OK. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. for Color Scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. If the entire network does not highlight. a disconnection exists. fittings. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. highlight a segment of the main duct. Usually. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. The first time you press Tab. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. and equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.

98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. select By View. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and then click OK. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and on the Options Bar. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. under Mechanical . select the WSHP. and click OK. but not all values are used in this view. under Graphics. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. for Flow. and press Enter.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 20 In the drawing area. for Values Displayed. select one of the diffusers in the system.Airflow.

and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Select the upper segment of main duct. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. select Friction.65 Pa/m. Click OK. and enter .Velocity. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. for Schemes.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Select Only. and drag it to the right. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and select 400. select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Under Constraints. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. select Calculated Size Only. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. click Cancel. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select the color scheme legend. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and then click to select it. for Branch Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. 26 Click OK. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.

30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Using this tool. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Use the information that displays (flow. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.The ductwork and fittings are updated. pressure. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 33 Move the cursor over the system components. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and pressure loss. static pressure. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).

rvt. also known as the critical path.NOTE As you inspect a system. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Finish. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m.

and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. and click to specify the end of the main duct.HVAC Plan .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select the WSHP. and click Draw Duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Design is highlighted. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.

select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct. double-click MEP . NOTE When drawing duct. enter 3000. 15 On the ViewCube. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. click the corner where the Top.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . for Offset. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.3D MEP. right-click the connector grip. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. Front. 14 In the Project Browser.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. The ductwork is automatically created. it is considered a closed loop.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). in space 115.

and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct.22 Using the same method. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning.

28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

and then click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. clear Restrict Height. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. under Constraints. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. such as a plenum. under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Airflow. for Flow. 40 Using the same method. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and click OK. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. select a segment of the main duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.

108 .

additional water source heat pumps from level 1. In this lesson.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. 109 . Create return and supply piping systems. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Automatically and manually lay out piping. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then. you place mechanical equipment. and a cooling tower located on the roof. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.

indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Left Return .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and select M_WSHP . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. in corridor 328. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.HVAC Plan .rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.7-18kW . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown.Design is highlighted.Horizontal High Efficiency .

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. verify that Wall faces is selected. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and enter 600. and click to place the dimension. 7 On the Options Bar. click the top edge of the WSHP. 8 Click the corridor wall face. click the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. verify that the WSHP is still selected. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. select the 2 WSHPs.) 14 Click Modify. as shown. and in the Type Selector.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Offset. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Under Mechanical. as shown. and click to place it in the mechanical room.75 L/s. 21 Click Modify. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. enter 0. for Water Flow. Click OK. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2750. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component.

you create the return and supply piping systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Unlike logical connections (systems). but without a corresponding system. You can create pipes to connect system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.22 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. including flow and pressure. analyses cannot be performed. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create the logical connection between the system components.

A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. while pressing Ctrl. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. As you assign equipment to systems. Therefore. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.rvt. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . It does not indicate a pipe layout path. indicating that it’s the active view. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 5 In the System Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. select the 2 WSHPs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. Assigning a system component to an existing system. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.HVAC Plan . In the System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. right-click the Systems column heading. and click View ➤ Piping. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. This display indicates that the system is selected.Design is highlighted. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. where it is easier to review the information. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.Mech 330).

13 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that on the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. for System Name. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You have created the hydronic return system. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and the Edit System tool is not active. for System Name. 12 In the drawing area. select the boiler. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 25 Select the boiler.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 22 In the Select Connector dialog.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and bypasses the cooling tower. double-click Roof . 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Creating a Piping System | 117 . the boiler supplies heated water to the system. In cooling mode. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and select the cooling tower. and click OK. 23 Close the roof plan view. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). In heating mode. 26 Click Finish Editing System. under Design ➤ HVAC . 19 In the Project Browser.Design.HVAC Plan .

you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. expand the Hydronic Return system category.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. In the System Browser. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. and click Column Settings. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. for Water Flow. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. indicating the logical connection. under Mechanical. and click Select. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.8. You also manually modify the layout path as required. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Expand All. 32 In the System Browser. enter 0. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. expand Piping. and click OK. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 28 Using the same method. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Properties. you can view several parameters. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 29 Right-click CHWS.

and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to select it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).HVAC Plan . press Tab to highlight the system. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . the boiler. you can place the cursor over a system component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 5 In the Filter dialog.rvt. When you draw a box to select components. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. click Check None. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and click OK. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. then the Select a System dialog displays. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.Mech 330).Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . A system preview displays in red. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. select Mechanical Equipment.

enter 450. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. select Perimeter. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. For Inset. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. select CHWR. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. 11 On the Options Bar. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. or architectural components. structural beams.9 In the Select a System dialog. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 13 Click Cancel. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 10 Click OK. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. It does not reference the architecture. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. duct.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. With each Tab. to display the path with thinner lines. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 17 Optionally. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 19 In the drawing area.75 L/s. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for each WSHP is 0.

24 Press Esc. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 1. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.50 L/s.75 L/s).50 L/s. and access its instance properties. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. verify that the value for Flow is 1. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. and click OK. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 23 Under Mechanical.

28 In the Project Browser. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel.HVAC Plan .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design. Logically. the Number of Elements is now 8. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. double-click Level 1 . click Edit System. On the Options Bar.

Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.94 L/s. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. note that the value for Flow is 4. access its instance properties. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly.44 L/s. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. which propagates flow throughout the system. and click Cancel. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.94 L/s. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 38 Using the same method. 35 Using the drag control. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. so the total flow of 6. as shown.50 L/s. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. Next. you physically close the CHWR loop. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.

40 In the Select a System dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 0. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.00%. and then click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . select a WSHP. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Click Settings. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. enter 450. 41 Click OK. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Inset. For Slope. select CHWS. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 47 In the drawing area. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.

or manually modify the pipe. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 50 Using the same method. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 51 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Either relocate the system components. as shown. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. To create the piping system. select a different layout solution. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.

you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. double-click 3D Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . and the return pipes are magenta. as shown. As you work in the training file. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. click Training Files. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.

as shown. select the section of piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the boiler. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. ■ Click to move the piping. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm.

click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 13 In the plan view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the return pipe riser. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and the lower one is secondary. 12 In the 3D view. and click OK. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top).11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and click Draw Pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . select the boiler. The connections are automatically created.

and press Enter. enter 381. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. enter 600. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and you select 1 connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ Move the cursor down.In a plan view.

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 18 Press Esc twice. and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the primary base mounted pump. and click OK. 19 In the plan view. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range.

as shown. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. and select it. you select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right. and when the connector point displays.

right-click the discharge connector. for Offset. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. enter 1200. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.28 Press Esc.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .33 Press Esc. these pipe connections were created automatically. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. as shown.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. enter 2850. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. type 300.

you validate the flow through the system. Next. You now have a closed loop system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify.

and click OK. the value is 0 L/s. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . notice that under Mechanical. notice that Flow is 6. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. and click Element Properties.22 L/s (1/2 of 6.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.44 L/s. for Cooling Water Flow. right-click. Connect the cooling tower Next. 46 Press Esc. In the Instance Properties dialog. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. select the cooling tower. and click Element Properties.50 or 50% of the Flow. under Mechanical. under Mechanical. 48 In the plan view. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 44 In the 3D view. When you create the pumps in parallel. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. view the properties for the secondary pump. as shown. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s). you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. which is rounded up to 3. 42 Click OK. 40 Click Cancel. right-click. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Press Esc. 41 Using the same method. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.

142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet).

51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.44 L/s. 50 In the 3D View.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .52 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. When the valve is open. and is heated by the boiler. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. click Training Files. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Valves In this exercise. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.rvt.

NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Press Esc twice. Adding Valves | 145 .50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and select M_Ball Valve .4 On the Options Bar. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. The bypass valve is closed by default. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.

50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select M_Ball Valve .10 Press Esc. place another M_Ball Valve . 14 Using the same method. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. and click OK. validate that the Flow is 6. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click. and click Element Properties. Adding Valves | 147 . For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). verify that Flow is 0 L/s. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. under Mechanical.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Using the same method.

22 Using the method you just learned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). Initially.rvt. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.44 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. click Training Files. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.44 L/s. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. and select M_Ball Valve . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select M_Ball Valve . In heating mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 6. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.

and click OK. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Flow.Size.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Pipe Color Fill .HVAC Plan . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Pipe Color Fill . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. for Schemes. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.

press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Select And. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. or offset elevations are incorrect. for Branch Sizing. 13 Press Esc. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select a different layout solution. Click OK.5 m/s. Under Constraints. Either relocate the system components. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and enter 220 Pa/m. or manually modify the pipe. and click to select the branch. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. enter 1. and for Velocity.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using the System Inspector. click Training Files. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.rvt.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Inspecting the System In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Inspecting the System | 151 . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . pressure. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and double-click 3D Building. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.

152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. flow.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. as shown.

Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. inspect Section 6 again. select 32° C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 10 Click Finish.7. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan .3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. targeting those systems that need attention. you need to validate them.rvt. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. the Static Pressure is 41916. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.1 Pa. 9 Using the same method.0 L/s. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.Note that the Flow is 1. In this exercise. and double-click Level 3 . and to size pipe. for Fluid Temperature. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. click Training Files.4 Pa. Warnings display. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834.

click Close. and click View. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. and click Expand All. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. After you assign components to a system. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. After you have assigned all components to systems. thus assigning the components to a system. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. expand the Unassigned folder. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. In the System Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. otherwise. 7 In the System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. TIP If you have multiple views open. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 6 In the Project Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. and select Level 3 .NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. right-click the Systems titlebar. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. If you place components without assigning them to a system. double-click Level 1 . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and confirm unassigned system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. right-click Hydronic Return. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design. 10 Using the same methods. the pipe is associated with that system. 4 In the System Browser. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments.HVAC Plan . and for pipe sizing. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. and click Show to view all of the system components. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.HVAC Plan . Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. As you learned when placing components. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design floor plan. For example. 12 In the System Browser.

14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 155 .13 Right-click CHWR. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

click Training Files. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Copper. ■ ■ For Material. Click OK. You also add a wiring type. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.rvt. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. click (Open). speeding up the design phase. ■ Click New Correction Factor. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. select 90.Wire Sizes. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.04. For Material. wiring. For Factor. and demand factors that are applied in the design. In this exercise you review electrical settings. For Temperature. enter THHN. select Wiring Types. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . As you place components and create circuits. In the left pane of the Open dialog. distribution systems. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. Select Correction Factor. expand Wiring . select Copper. enter 1. enter 70.

For Wires. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. For Minimum. Under More Than. enter 120/240. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For Value. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Insulation. select Demand Factors. select 10000 VA. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. enter 1. select Voltage Definitions. select 3. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Neutral Multiplier. select 240. select Power. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. enter 240. select Steel. For L-G Voltage. select Hot Conductor Size. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. select THHN. select 75. enter 50. For L-L Voltage. select 120. enter 250. Select Neutral Required. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. enter 2000. By specifying a range. For Neutral Size. enter 220. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. Click OK. select Single. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 240. For Max Size.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Phase.0. For Conduit Type. select Distribution Systems. Click Split. For Maximum.

under the Electrical . 5 In the drawing area. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. For Discipline. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. click Add. such as offices. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).Lighting group in the space element properties. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. and double-click Level 2 . restrooms.rvt. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Later in the tutorial. Under Categories. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. For Type of Parameter. select Electrical. select Electrical .Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. select Spaces. select Illuminance. Verify that Instance is selected. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. click (Open). Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. enter Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Lighting. For Group Parameter Under. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.Lighting Plan. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. click Training Files. and conference rooms. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Select Schedule Keys. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Space Lighting Requirements. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. Click OK. under Electrical . and for Key Name. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Name. enter Open Office. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 .Lighting. double-click Required Lighting Level. and click OK. enter Lighting Levels. enter 485.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Available Fields. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Click OK. select Spaces. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

for Sorting/Grouping. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. select Required Lighting Level. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. which is mapped to project units. click Edit. Select Blank Line. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By.Lighting Plan. change the sort order back to the default setting. 22 Using the same method. Notice that as you enter the data. 21 Click OK twice. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .

or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. under Identity Data. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. Later in this exercise. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . for Lighting Levels. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. that Required Lighting Level is blank.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 27 Click OK. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. In this exercise. the value input applies only to the selected space. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. click (Open). select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog.

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Under Schemes. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m.00 lx. Select the scheme for 500 lx. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.00 lx. for Title. click (Duplicate). select Spaces. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. and in the At Least column.00. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. For Color.rvt. Select the scheme for At Least 20. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. verify the By Range is selected. Select the scheme for 450. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. and press ENTER. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. enter 900. and click (Add Value). ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and press ENTER. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. for Category. enter 800. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. enter 200. click (Add Value) again.00 lx. For example. enter Required Lighting Levels. ■ Click OK. then the new value will be 400 lx. click Training Files. 00 lx still selected. and press Enter. and click (Add Value) five times.00. for Name. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter Required Lighting and click OK. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. select Required Lighting Level.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200.

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Spaces. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. Average Estimated Illumination. 13 Click Calculated Value. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Level. Click OK. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area. For Color Scheme. double-click Number. select Required Lighting.Lighting CF.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . For Discipline. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. for Available Fields. For Name. select Illuminance. and Required Lighting Level. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. and double-click Level 2 . Name. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. enter Lighting Delta. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Spaces.

select Not Between. select Lighting Delta. for Formula. Click OK. Select Header. Click OK three times. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Red. select Level. click Browse. Click OK twice. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Value. for Test. for Fields. On the Formatting tab. and click Browse. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Required Lighting Level. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. Click Conditional Format. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Condition. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Select Blank Line. type a hyphen. Click Background Color. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. for Custom Colors. select Average Estimated Illumination. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. for Sort by.■ For Formula. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. press the spacebar.

16 Close the file with or without saving it.The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .

170 .

Then. Use the System Browser to check your design. First. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. power circuits. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. 171 . you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create power loads. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create a panel schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise.

7 In the Project Browser. click (Open). Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Lighting Ceiling plan. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. for the Spaces Category. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx.rvt. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. By using orange as the color for this range. select Average Estimated Illumination.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . for Basic Colors. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Color dialog. 2 In the drawing area. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . select Orange.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files.Lighting CF view is open. 8 In the Project Browser. You can create additional color schemes. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select the color legend. Under Scheme Definition.

all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . zoom to space Library 219. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 13 Click the Level 2 . 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.

The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 18 Click to place the fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.the +/. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.5 fc range is satisfied. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.5 fc range. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 19 Press ESC to end the command.277V. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. the fixtures will move accordingly. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

for Name enter and click OK.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. for Apparent Load. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.00 VA. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 162. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. In the Name dialog. scroll to view space space Library 219.

■ Under Photometrics. Click OK. In the next exercise. specify 15000. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.85. select the top center fixture.ies and click Open. select Xenon and click OK. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Color. click (Open). 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing Switches. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ Click OK twice. click the value for Light Loss Factor. and receptacles to your design. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Junction Boxes. enter . select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. junction boxes. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Junction Boxes. for Type Mark. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 183 . enter F15. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. for Lamp. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Color Preset.00 lm. Under Photometrics. Under Electrical. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. In the Select File dialog. 9 In space Library 219. you add switches. and click OK. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. ■ Click Apply. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 2 In the drawing area. Under Photometrics.93. enter . select 463T5_S. click the value for Initial Intensity. click Training Files.

277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor .

9 Press ESC to end the command.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.rfa and click Open. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.NoLoad. The element type M_Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Select M_Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 .

186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. zoom to space Library 219. enter JB-1NL.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. note the Number of Poles is 1.14 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Under Electrical. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the junction box. enter 2750. Click Edit Type. NOTE When entering values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 21 In the drawing area.Offset.

NOTE If necessary. Distribution System. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Number of Elements. 24 For any column. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Number. right-click and click Column Settings. 26 In the System Browser. 23 In the System Browser. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Voltage. Space Name. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Size. Junction Boxes.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Select Load. Click OK. Expand Electrical.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

and Receptacles | 189 . 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. move the cursor along the wall. 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 40 On the Options Bar. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes.

42 Move the cursor down. 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and Receptacles | 191 . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. Placing Switches. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.Surface: 100A.208V MCB . zoom to the space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). click Training Files. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 2 In the drawing area.rvt. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . #1 Pole Breakers. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. for Max. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. select 480/277 Wye. For Panel Name. Click OK. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .480V MCB . For Panel Name.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 8 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. enter 20. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. for Distribution System. for Max. enter LP-2B. #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter PP-2B. select 120/208 Wye. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Click OK.

select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. 20 In the drawing area. 23 In the Filter dialog. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . which is the logical connection between the elements. zoom to space Instruction 221. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. click Check None. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.

25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .35 Select the left three-way switch. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click (Open). select Wires.39 Using the same method. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. for Hot Conductors. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. click Check None. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. 2 In the drawing area. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Click OK. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 42 In the Filter dialog. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loads. click Training Files. Click OK. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. except without wire. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and create permanent wiring. enter 2. and for Category.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 13 In the System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. right-click on the Systems heading.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. and verify that Load. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand Power. Rating. and Voltage Drop are selected. Expand Electrical. Voltage. Distribution System.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 30 Close the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK. 22 With the junction box still selected. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. under Electrical. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Click Tags.

Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. select Break. Click Yes. click Edit Type. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 35 Press ESC to end the command. under Identity Data. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter FR4. For Circuit Number. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 40 Click OK twice. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. for Type Mark. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 47 In the drawing area. click below the first one to place it. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . notice the label parameters and click Cancel.

49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click Save. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area.rvt. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click OK. click Check None.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. select Lighting Fixture Tags. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. and click Apply. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for File Name. click (Open). 54 Select all of the tags. 57 In the Filter dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Next you create a switch system. 52 In the Save As dialog. enter a comma. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222.rfa. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.

8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. under Electrical Lighting. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. for Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. enter a. 2 In the drawing area. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.

Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. for switch ID. Click OK. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.Lighting. under Electrical .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. enter b. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

Next you create a circuit and size wire. select the PP-2B panel. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click Check None. Click OK. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Electrical . click (Open). 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.Loads. Circuits are used for power. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and click Element Properties. lighting. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 7 In space Electrical 220. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. for Hot Conductors. enter 2. and data systems. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. select Electrical Fixtures. Click OK. and for Category. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 2 In the drawing area.rvt.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Filter dialog.

for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the right pane.13 Select the wire again. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. and click to select the circuit. and in the drawing area. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and click Open. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.

select the PP-2B panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 26 Press Delete. as shown. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 28 In the drawing area. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Next you balance the loads for your design. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.

select panel LP-2B.rvt. 6 Click OK. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. click Open. 1-#10. enter 30A. After re-balancing loads. for Rating. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. the distribution is shifted. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Rebalance Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 2 In the drawing area. 1-#10. 3 In the Electrical space. Scroll down. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Click OK. zoom to space Electrical 220. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1-#12. Had there been a greater imbalance. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Training Files. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Under Electrical-Loads. 1-#12.

and click OK. 24 Click Select Panel. enter 40A. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. Next you create a panel schedule. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.Loads. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 12 Select panel PP-2B. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. enter 25A. for Rating. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and click Finish Editing Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . under Electrical . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 14 Close the warning dialog. 17 Close the warning dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select the transformer TP-2B.

This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. click Training Files. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. under Other. 6 In the Project Browser. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. expand Sheets (all). 10 Click OK twice. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. for Font Size. Under Header Text. Under Header Text. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Font. and open E601 . Select PP-2B. click Edit. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 4 mm. enter 5 mm. for Font Size. Click OK. select Berlin Sans FB.Panel Schedules. select Bold and Italic. 4 Close the report. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Appearance. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . The Panel Schedule Report displays.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Body Text. 5 In the Project Browser. click (Open). 11 Close the file with or without saving it.

8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. select space Lounge 212.rvt. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. click (Open). ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. each with a load of 180VA. Expand Unassigned. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit.

notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 20 On the Options Bar. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. under Warnings. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. for Panel. 15 In the dialog. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. In the System Browser. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 16 Close the details dialog. select MDP-1. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Checking Your Design | 215 .

216 .

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

Design is open. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. type PVC .rvt. 219 . click Training Files. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Sanitary.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. and click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Properties. 4 In the Name dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. In this lesson. you create a PVC pipe type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. click Duplicate. right-click PVC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. planning is critical to a successful design. 2 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Vent.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . in addition to loading existing families. Adding a pipe size. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.

select M_Tee Sanitary . under Mechanical. click Training Files. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 22 Click New Size. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. for Material. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.Sch 40 . 21 In the right pane. and click Main. and click OK. enter 54. In the Project Browser. 15 For System Type. select Sanitary. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .006 mm. and open Metric\M_Trap P . select Plastic. under Pipe Types. Cross. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent .DWV: Standard.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the left pane. click Pipe Settings. enter 46.000 mm.rfa. select Sanitary. enter -1250. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 6 Click OK. 13 In the right panel. click Modify.PVC . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select None. 10 On the Selection panel. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.DWV: Standard. enter 10°.293 mm.Sch 40 . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 26 Click OK. select Tee.DWV. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Branch. PVC . 25 For Outside. 27 For the new pipe size. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. enter 45. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Tee.Sch 40 . 18 For System Type. Tap. 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC . for Nominal. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset.PVC .Vent is listed.

add a hot water heater. including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. and hot and cold water piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base is placed. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . as shown. select Sanitary 107. A preview of the piping layout displays. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. a toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. for example. 16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select one of the components in the system.

26 For Pipe Type. select PVC . The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. for Solution Type. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and for Offset. 28 On the Options Bar. enter -1225. for Diameter. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 30 Click Modify. You accept this suggested solution. 23 For Pipe Type. select 100 mm. enter 1. and click OK.Sanitary. select Intersections. and click Settings. 25 In the left pane. click Solutions. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select PVC .19 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Main. The default settings are automatically modified. for Slope. select Branch. 24 For Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. enter -350 mm. 29 On the Options Bar. enter -350 mm.05%. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.Sanitary. 27 For Offset. 21 On Options Bar. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.33 In the 3D view. 34 Click Modify. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the fitting and click to reorient it. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .Overall.

you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown.

click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select 560 mmx560 mm . and verify that Level 1 .rvt. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 On the Element panel.Public. under M_Lavatory .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. as shown. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Rectangular. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. in the Type Selector.

select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. enter 711.7 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . On the Options Bar.2. 8 Select the sink.

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 15 Click the 3 sinks. enter 711. Press Esc. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.2. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System.

under Design ➤ Plumbing . double-click 3D Plumbing .16 On the Edit System panel. 21 Select the tee. 20 Select the fitting. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 19 In the 3D view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. In the System Browser. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Overall. click Finish Editing System. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 .

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).05%. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 27 Click Modify. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. for Offset. enter 760 mm. When you press the Spacebar.22 In the plan view. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope. and click Apply. enter 1. with the tee fitting selected.

click to place the fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 30 In the 3D view. select Standard. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Click Modify. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV.PVC .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. right-click the right connector. In the next steps. on the Options Bar. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 150 mm. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting. enter 305 mm. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.33 With the fitting selected. 34 Press Esc. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. and press Enter.

and click to place the pipe. 42 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Modify. as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. and press Esc. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 48 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. enter 150 mm. 47 Move the cursor down. press Spacebar. 46 In the section view. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector.

53 Using the same method. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.PVC . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . 54 Click Modify. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.DWV. 56 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 52 In the plan view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 55 In the 3D view. select Standard. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. under M_Trap P . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 51 In the Type Selector.

click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the right sink to the double wye. and press Enter. Move the cursor to the left. Select the double wye pipe on the left. In the plan view. Click Modify. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 150 mm. select the left P-Trap. 58 Using the same method. Click in the plan view.

On the Routing Solutions panel. In the Type Selector. select PVC Sanitary. as shown. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. select the section of pipe you just drew. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select a proposed solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution.■ In the 3D view.

verify that 1. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. click Training Files. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. and verify the slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. adjusting the sanitary stack. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.05% is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Finish. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.

3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 9 In the Type Selector. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . click Modify. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Overall. and click the intersection to place the fitting. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Floor level line.Plumbing Plan . select the elbow fitting on the right.PVC . 5 Select the tee. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 10 In the 3D view.Design. right-click the top connector.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sch 40 . and click to draw the pipe. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 7 On the Selection panel. 3 In the Section view. select Standard. select the vertical stack. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

267 . each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You create a new pipe type. click Training Files. If the tutorial training files are not present. After finishing each exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. and click Duplicate. In this lesson. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. go to http://www. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. In this tutorial. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you can choose to save your work. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 2 Right-click Standard.

click Rename. In the next exercise. For Offset. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For System Type. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Main. Next. and then click OK. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. 9 Click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For Pipe Type. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. However. select Fire Protection Wet. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you modify the type properties of the pipe. or architectural components. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. duct. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. under Mechanical. verify that 2800 is specified. verify that 2800 is selected. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. and click Properties. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. structural beams.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Carbon Steel. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Pipe Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane. for Material. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. For System Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes.

Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. right-click. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. select Spaces. enter Zone 1. For Group parameter under. and click Element Properties. 8 Using a crossing window. select Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. and then click OK. 6 In the drawing area. select the upper half of the building. for Name. enter Sprinkler Zone. 5 Click OK twice. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Fire Protection Piping Plan . click Add.Design is highlighted. Under Categories. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . the space crossing lines display. under Fire Protection. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. including a calculated value parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Fire Protection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. verify that only Spaces are selected. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 10 In the Filter dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. and then click OK. enter Zone 2. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . click Training Files.rvt. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Zone 1. and click OK. to which you add various parameters. 13 Using the same method. and then access instance properties.

For Type of Parameter.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. enter Light. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Fire Protection. Click OK. select mm. For Name. Click OK. double-click on each column separator. 11 Click OK twice. for Name. click the Formatting tab. For Key name.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Using the same method. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. click Add Parameter.Design is highlighted. For Group parameter under.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Units. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 14 Select the new header. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and on the ribbon. select Millimeters. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. The schedule displays. select 0 decimal places. 7 Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. Select Schedule keys. select Spaces. For Unit symbol. For Rounding. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Field Format. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . enter Maximum Spacing. select Maximum Spacing. select Length. 9 On the Formatting tab.

enter 40. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter 4575. Unobstructed Extra. Click OK. select Spaces.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. and press Enter. Unobstructed Ordinary. For Name. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.

Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Formula. For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. 22 Click OK twice. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. For Units. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Area. select 0 decimal place. select Minimum Sprinklers. under Available fields. select Number. select Common. The Sprinkler Schedule displays.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select Fixed. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. In the Fields dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and click OK. For Rounding. click . This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and click Field Format. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Click OK.

select Minimum Sprinklers. and then click Field Format. click Edit. For Then by (second instance). 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Then by. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Fields. and select Totals only. verify that Use default settings is selected. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. At the bottom of the dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Hidden field. under Other. select Level. For Fields. Under Field formatting. select Grand totals. for Sorting/Grouping. and click View Properties. for Sort by. 26 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. ■ In the Format dialog. select Sprinkler Zone.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Number. and then select Hidden field. Select Header and Blank line.

Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group.27 In the drawing area. for Available fields. select Sprinklers. under Other. select Calculate totals. and click View Properties. and Count. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. For Category. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. select Level equals Level 2. Under Field formatting. select Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. 30 Click OK twice. double-click Type. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. delete the word Maximum. select Grand totals. for Filter by. for Filter. click Edit. and select Totals only. for Fields. System Name. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Count. click Edit.

41 In the plan view. under Identity Data. 44 In the schedule. select Ordinary. and access the instance properties. select Light. The parameter change is evident in the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 51 In the Instance Properties dialog.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and click OK. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. select Ordinary. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. As a result. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 52 Click OK. under Identity Data. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. for Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 With the space still selected. for Protection Area Construction Type. but their values are not determined. double-click FP . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 48 In the floor plan. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. Unobstructed. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule.Fire Protection Plan Design.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. As you create the system. methodology. By following the recommended workflow. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the tutorial training files are not present. At the end of this tutorial. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and double-click Level 2 . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 279 . and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you will understand the process. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can choose to save your work.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. As you place the sprinklers. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When this happens. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. After placing the initial sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 3 In the Project Browser. When there is a small misalignment.

because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. Also. 11 In the drawing area. as shown. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. while pressing Ctrl. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 10 Press Esc twice. 206.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 13 On the Options Bar. and 207. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 9 In space Instruction 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. verify that Constrain is cleared. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.

You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 18 Type WT. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 200B. and then press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Next. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and 200C). 17 In the Project Browser.Design.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . open Design ➤ FP . 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. specify a vertical offset.

and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. This number is determined in the schedule. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Element Properties. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. move the cursor to the right. 29 Press Esc. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. enter 2900 mm. After creating the logical connection. enter 11. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 25 Click OK. you adjust the offset.0. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and with piping (physical connection). Notice that the schedule updates. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and press Enter. enter 4100. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. for Offset. For Number. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. In the next exercise.19 In the floor plan. Next. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. In this exercise. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met.FP_Ceiling view.

6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. 5 Right-click the header. click Training Files. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and select Piping. click View ➤ Systems.Design is highlighted.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . However. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Fire Protection Plan . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 1 In the Project Browser. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Unlike logical connections (systems).

and select the system. within the Piping Systems folder. place the cursor over a sprinkler. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. In the System Browser. 11 With the system still selected. press Tab. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Creating a Piping System | 285 . select an initial piping layout. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Next. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and click Select.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. named Fire Protection Wet. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. indicating the logical connection.

■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and on the Options Bar. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. for Diameter. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that Main is selected. enter -3650. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 14 Click Finish Editing System. select Branch.0 is specified. and a piping layout preview displays. 19 Click OK. 15 In the drawing area. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. as shown. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. click Place Base. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that 2800. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 13 In the System Browser. 22 On the Options Bar. for System Name. and number of elements in the system. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected.The Edit Piping System panel displays. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 23 For Offset. For Pipe Type. system equipment. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. click Settings. click Solutions. In the left pane. providing system editing tools. When the layout is finished.Wet is selected. select 150 mm. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 12 On the Options Bar.

A (parallel movement control) displays. and select solution 4. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Modify. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. On the Generate Layout panel. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. and green represents branch lines). (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. Creating a Piping System | 287 . the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout.

as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 29 Click Finish Layout. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary. Either relocate the system components.

3 If necessary. and various manual pipe creation tools. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the Connect Into tool.rvt. and then you create piping to physically connect them. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Next. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.Design is highlighted. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.33 Close the file with or without saving it. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. 2 Zoom in.Fire Protection Piping Plan . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.

radiators. click Finish Editing System. 5 In the drawing area. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. air terminals. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 9 On the Edit System panel.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and pipe or duct is created. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 8 In the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. you can select the pipe or duct. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. mechanical equipment. click Add To System. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. or a system component to display system tools.

17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 21 In the Piping Plan. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. verify that Solutions is selected. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then tile the views. 13 Click Finish Layout. 23 View the result in the 3D view. verify that Network is selected. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . for Solution Type. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and select solution 5.11 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 14 Close the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar.

pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. 29 Using the same method. and then press Esc. right-click.24 In the Piping Plan.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. select 2800. and click Draw Pipe. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 In the drawing area. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . for Offset.

for Scale. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. select 1 : 50.rvt. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. click Training Files. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.Design is highlighted. Because the whole system highlights. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 4 On the Options Bar. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 31 In the plan view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. indicating that it’s the active view.

Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and click View Properties.6 Press Esc. double-click on the section head to open the section view. 8 Right-click.

and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. drag the top section boundary line up. and click Apply Default View Template. Click OK. for Sub-Discipline. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. For Default View Template. 10 In the Project Browser.Design the active view.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. Under Identity Data. 19 Make Level 2 . 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. right-click Design ➤ FP .Fire Protection Plan . 13 Select the elbow fitting. enter 2135. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. and press Enter.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 15 Press Spacebar. 22 In the drawing area. and then right-click the top connector. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . select FP . For View Classification. enter FP Section_Stair. select Design. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . select MEP Section.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. for View Name. 17 Move the cursor up. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and click Draw Pipe.Design. 14 Select the tee fitting. 12 If necessary.

zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. and then click Modify. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and click Draw Pipe. 24 Select the cabinet. select .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar.23 In the section view. verify that Automatically Connect is active.

rfa. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. click Yes to load a family. 31 In the alert dialog.29 Close the section view. 32 In the Open dialog. and then click Modify. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 .50 mm is selected. 33 In the Type Selector. as shown. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. verify that M_Gate Valve . and click Open. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.

Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.rvt. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. click Training Files.

7 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify. for Diameter. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). width. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. height. 6 In the Filter dialog. or height. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Changing the diameter. and click OK. select 25mm. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. width.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . or width. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. click Check None. 4 In the floor plan view.

select the linked architectural file. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. .rfa. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. They display only in the view in which they were placed. and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 18 In the 3D view. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). Clear Leader. 12 If necessary. NOTE Tags are view specific. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. Press Esc. click to place the tag. By hiding the linked file. and after each segment highlights. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 On the View Control Bar.

20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. press Tab. select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. and when the section highlights. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. 21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .

as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. select 40mm. and maximize the floor plan. 25 On the Options Bar. and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. The pipe diameter is modified. 24 In the drawing area. 26 Using the same method. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.

In this exercise. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. In this tutorial. For additional practice. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. You added tags to pipes.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you created a wet fire protection system.

304 .

create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

under Floor Plans. and view references. dependent views. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. and apply a view template.rvt. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Properties. matchlines. and click Rename.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. 307 . 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click Training Files. If the view included detail graphics.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you begin the construction documentation for the building project. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.

right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 4 Using the same method. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. and click Rename. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and then press Esc. and click Apply Default View Template. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. more focused. 10 In the drawing area. views and put them on the sheet. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. In the left pane of the Open dialog.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties.rvt. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 7 Close the file without saving. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. click Training Files. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 9 Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.

14 Click Finish Matchline. 13 Press Esc twice. 19 In the drawing area. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select black. Click OK. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. click the current value.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. select Double Dash . For Line Pattern. In the Color dialog. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select 11. and click OK. For Line Weight. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. and then press Esc. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.

23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 25 Using the same method. for Target view. crop the dependent views for plans B and C.20 Select the upper view reference and. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. on the Options Bar.

4 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D Plumbing. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. for View Name. For Default View Template. and click Properties. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 2 Zoom in. and zoom to each of the view references. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the section box. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Plumbing Isometric. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. click Training Files. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 27 Using the same method.Domestic Water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. enter Plumbing Isometric . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201.

10 Right-click. select Plumbing. and click to select it. for View Classification. select Dash. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and then click OK. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 7 Select the WSHPs in the view.Domestic Water. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Sub-Discipline. select 3. For Pattern. Click OK. Click Apply. select Documentation. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. The section crop lines no longer display. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . 13 Using the same method. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it. 15 Right-click. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.

and in the view properties. and in the Type Selector. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. specify Plumbing . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . and for Default View Template. 19 Using methods learned previously.5mm Arial. verify that Common is selected. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. select 1. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.16 Press Esc. For Slope.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Isometric. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. On the View Control Bar. click on the Format value.

for Rounding. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When the view is associated with a sheet.rvt. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . you use a plan view to create a callout view. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.■ In the Format dialog. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 10. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and then place the callout view on a sheet. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 Press Esc twice. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. as shown. 22 Click OK twice.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. select 1 : 50. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 On the Options Bar. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). Creating Callout Views | 317 .2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. for Scale.

and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. for Line Weight. using the same method.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. and select the viewport. 13 In the Project Browser. drag it to the sheet. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . double-click M601 . Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. select 5. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

Creating Callout Views | 319 . enter WSHP PART PLAN. for View Name. For Title on Sheet. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 17 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click the callout view. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

and click OK. and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Callout Views | 321 . 25 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. enter Typical WSHP Detail.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). under Names.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.

322 .

Creating Annotations In this exercise. 323 . double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. symbols. click Training Files. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. linetypes. duct tags.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and annotation to create a legend. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. as shown. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. work with model-based components. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.

9 Press Esc twice. and select 1. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 8 With the text still selected.

as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 16 In the drawing area. a return diffuser. and then click Right Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. a segment of round duct. Creating Annotations | 325 . The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts.

If necessary. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. and click OK. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 20 In the Tags dialog. as shown. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 25 In the drawing area. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. click Load. clear Leader. 24 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog.rfa. 21 In the Load Family dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area.17 Click Modify. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. for Ducts. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. under Category. and click Open. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.

27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select Horizontal. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and Attached End. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area.26 On the Options Bar. Leader. and then press Esc. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 327 . specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. for Leader. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. as shown. 34 In the drawing area. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 36 Press Esc twice. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

and lock lighting fixtures. 40 Using the method learned previously. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Creating Dimensions | 329 . not simply an instance property. for Leader Arrowhead. That’s because you changed a type property. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 37 In the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. and click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. lay out. click Training Files. select the last tag placed.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. and all elements of that type are affected.

8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. On the Options Bar. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 14 Using the same method. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 13 Press Esc. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 12 Click EQ. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then select the interior face of the wall. select the dimension line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.

linework. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. click the 3 interior locks on the line. enter 2430. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Creating a Legend | 331 .rvt. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the dimensions are locked. and notes. annotation symbols. 20 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.9). 17 Press Esc. and offset them from the wall. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and press Enter. 19 Select the dimension value (3376.

enter Diffuser Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select 1 : 50. click below the title to place the diffuser.200 Neck. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . and select 1. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 5 Click in the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select Floor Plan. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. For Scale. Click OK.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. For View.

and select 1.11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser. Creating a Legend | 333 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 27 While pressing Ctrl.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 26 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP and its text note. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 21 Press Esc. 24 Select the component’s break line.

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 35 Change the text on the right to N.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. and then click Modify. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .30 Select Spot Elevation . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 34 Using the method learned previously. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Creating a Legend | 335 .

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line .

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. A detail callout that references another view. click Training Files.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . detail groups. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.113 East elevation view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 337 . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.rvt. and text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A drafting view using detail components.

8 Using the same method.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Drag the Power Riser . and then modify and align the views.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 4 On the Options Bar. Next.113 East on the sheet. select each of the 2 panelboards. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. clear Leader. 5 In the drawing area. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. place Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . right-click. and click OK. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. select the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Press Esc. and click Deactivate View. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet. 13 Right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. under Identity Data. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. giving the appearance of a single view.

as shown. 22 Press Esc.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you add wiring to the diagram. and select Title w Line . 19 Select the Level 1 line. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. In the next exercise. select the 113 East elevation view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and click Activate View.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view.

3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 9 Beginning at the transformer. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. select 6. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. for Line Weight. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. click New. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. In the Line Styles dialog. Under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .113 North view. expand Lines. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). As you draw. enter Electrical Power. for Name.rvt. verify that Chain is selected. click Training Files. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that there are no snaps active. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the New Subcategory dialog.

as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 28 Click above the cap. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click Modify. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

enter 3. click on the length dimension value. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. enter 12. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. you can ensure that they stay together. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and press Enter.0. change the length of the bottom line to 3. and press Enter.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 40 Press Esc. enter 7. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. You enter exact values for each line length. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 42 On the Options Bar. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. Using the same method. Press Esc. and then press Esc. for Offset. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 39 Move the cursor to the right.

54 Select the group. 50 With the group selected. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. TP-2B. while pressing Ctrl. enter Ground. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 47 In the drawing area.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. and click OK. 52 Select the detail group. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then press Esc. 46 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 51 Using the method learned previously. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select all 3 lines.

you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. In later exercises. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and will place it on sheet E01.

3 Select the section box. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. select 3D Views. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. click Training Files.rvt. Back. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 4 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge. for Name.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Apply View Template. 5 Right-click the copy. click Home. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and double click Typical Make Up Air. and then press Esc.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. 8 On the ViewCube. Walkthroughs.

label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). 15 Using the same method. and click to specify the second leader point. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 3D HVAC Iso. Typical. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Click OK. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown.■ ■ Under Names. Move the cursor down and to the left. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

as shown. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Crop Region Visible. 19 Complete the text labels. and then click OK. and under Extents.18 Press Esc. To rotate and reposition a text label. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click on the crop region. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.

29 Right click the view. 30 On the View Control Bar. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 33 Right-click the view. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. scroll down. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.25 Click OK. 32 In the Instance Properties. and under Extents. Use detail lines to create a detail group. click Training Files. Place a detail component. and click Deactivate View. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. select Crop View and Section Box.rvt. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click View Properties. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents.

4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 13 In the drawing area. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Plumbing. 12 On the Element panel. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). For Scale. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). right-click the view name. select Documentation. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 9 Zoom in to the component. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 3 In the Project Browser. click the point at the top of the drain.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Click OK. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. as shown. and click Properties. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. select 1 : 5. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.

and click OK. Concrete. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 21 In the drawing area.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. select C.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.I. 20 Select 1. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Click Modify. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and then press Esc. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. for Type. 18 With the filled region still selected. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.P.

356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 28 Click Modify. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 23 In the drawing area. select the filled region.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. (Line). and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then click to select them. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 On the Options Bar.

and then press Esc. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 40 Click Finish Region. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.

49 Click Modify. draw wide detail lines as shown.D. (Rectangle). enter Flashing Membrane_F.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and click OK. as shown. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the chain. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 45 Using the method learned previously. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and then click to select them. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. press Spacebar twice. as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .

66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 67 On the Options Bar. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.62 Press Esc twice. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

80 Press Esc twice. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 72 If necessary. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 76 To select the leader start point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select 15000 (Division 15 . select the keynote and drag the text to the right.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. and then click OK. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 81 Select the text note. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 71 Click Modify.

362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. open P103 . and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful